Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG Manualscomputers & electronicsLGP895

User Guide

LG-P895

MFL67684824 (1.0) W

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

LG-P895

MFL67684824 (1.0) W www.lg.comwww.lg.com

ENGLISH

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻌﻟﺍ

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

Summary of content (428 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ENGLISH ENGLISH ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ LG-P895 www.lg.com MFL67684824 (1.0) W User Guide LG-P895 MFL67684824 (1.0) W www.lg.
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ LG-P895‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .Copyright ©2012 LG Electronics, Inc‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ LG‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪LG Group‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪7 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪18 ..................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪31 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪35 ................................ QuickMemo‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪37 ................. Micro-USIM‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪38 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪39 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪39 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪41 ......................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺚ ‪57 ............................. Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪58 ................................ SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪59 .......................SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪64 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪64 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻤﺎء ‪64 ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪64 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪65 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪65 .......................
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪-‬ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪75 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪75 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪76 .................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪77 ....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ‪77 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪79 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ّﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪79 ......................‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪80 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪80 ..........................
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪94 ......................................‬‬ ‫‪96 ...................................... LG Tag+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪97 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ‪98 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪98 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ‪98 ....................‬‬ ‫‪100 .......................... LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪100 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪101 .........
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪112 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪112 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪115 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪118 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪120 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪122 .........................‬‬ ‫‪124 ................................... DivX HD‬‬ ‫‪125 ......................................... DTS‬‬ ‫‪125 ............................
PAGE 9
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴّﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﺮﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ّﺪﺩ )‪.(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪LG-P895‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪ DASY4‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ‪ 0.284‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ 10‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﺪ ‪ 0.604‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪10‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪ (RF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1.5‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎً ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 13
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺤﻄﻤًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ّ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻻ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﺎً ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ّ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ّﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻻ ّ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ LG-P895‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .EC/1999/5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪http://www.lg.com/global/support/‬‬ ‫‪cedoc/RetrieveProductCeDOC.jsp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ < ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ < ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ!‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ .10%‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،GPS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻠﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪Google Mail‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻘﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ™ﺳﻮﻕ ‪ . Play‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺟﺴﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫<ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ < ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ < ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﻄﺎً ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺹ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 25
‫> ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ <‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ّ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﻭﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ( ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ "ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫‪ DRM‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻷﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ً‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ <‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪(Suite‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ "‪ "LG PC Suite‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ "‪ ،"LG PC Suite‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ "‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪."Suite‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ "‪"LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ "‪ "LG PC Suite‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.LG‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ < LG‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫)‪ (LG-P895‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ < ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ )‪.
PAGE 29
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(RAM‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 512‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ‪ 768 x 1024‬ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪(.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ "‪LG‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎ ﻟﺮﺍﺣﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫‪"PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪. USB‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ِﺬ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫)‪.(MTP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫< ﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ .12‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻤّﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﻤﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ٍ 10‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ™‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ Search‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺴﺲ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻳﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(Flash‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪QuickMemo‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ QuickMemo‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪-Quick‬‬ ‫‪ Memo‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪QuickMemo‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .QuickMemo‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪QuickMemo‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،QuickMemo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ QuickMemo‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫– ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ QuickMemo‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Micro-USIM‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪:Micro-USIM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ّ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،LG-P895‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺠﻨّﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ً‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﻄﺎً ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺹ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ -‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ‪ -‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ – ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺒﻂء‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺮﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺧ ًﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺎً ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰﺍً ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Micro-USIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ NFC‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ‪ Gmail‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Google talk‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻧﺸﻂ‬ ‫‪47‬‬
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ "‪.("á‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ "‪ ،"á‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻳُﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ "‪"a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ Google‬ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.Google‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Google‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ < Gmail‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Google‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ .(WAP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺆﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪) .
PAGE 55
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،LG-P895‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫< ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ <‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪http://www.android.com/tether.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ <‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ <‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ‪) Linux‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،(Ubuntu‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫)‪ (SSID‬ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ!‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛـ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻮﻣًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺑﻘﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺚ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ‪ً Wi-Fi Direct‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ Direct‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪.SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﺎ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﺎً ﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗُﻔﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ SmartShare‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪) DLNA‬ﺗﺤﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ DLNA‬ﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺪﻱ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ SmartShare‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ( ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ )ﻛﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ(‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ <‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪. SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪ DLNA‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ DMS‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "+‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘُﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ – ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ـ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ‪) .
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء <‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺎً ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪.Windows Explorer‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻓﺘﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-P895‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ‪ SMS‬ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪ MMS‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘُﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪ 6‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 160‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎً‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪.SMS‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،SMS‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ MMS‬ﻭﺳﺘﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )‪ SMS‬ﻭ‪ (MMS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-P895‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪-‬ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Gmail‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ POP3‬ﻭ‪ IMAP‬ﻭ‪.Exchange‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪-‬ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ < ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ < ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑًﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ < ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫< ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺗﻚ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻃﺔ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪-‬ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍً ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ّﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪٢٣٠٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ – ﻗﻞ "ﺗﺸﻴﺰ" )ﺍﺑﺘﺴﻢ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮّﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ – ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ – ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ّ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‬ ‫– ﻗﻞ "ﺗﺸﻴﺰ" )ﺍﺑﺘﺴﻢ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫– ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮء‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫– ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻥ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﻘﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ّﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﻴﺔ – ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ًﺓ ﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪.
PAGE 93
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻀ ّﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-P895‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ Dolby‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻀ ّﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ LG-P895‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ <‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Tag+ reading‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ )ﻏﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 101
‫– ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Gmail‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ‪ Picasa‬ﻭ ‪Google+‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻗﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG‬ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ "ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ" ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪-LG Smart‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪.World‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ‪/‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪LG‬‬ ‫‪.SmartWorld‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻚ – ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‬ ‫< ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ <‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ < ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-P895‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻔﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ )ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﺛﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ Microsoft Exchange‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Polaris Office‬ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪FileShare‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫< ‪FileShare‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪106‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ < ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ < ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ < ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ < ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ < ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺳﺘﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ < ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎً ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ -‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺃﻳﺎً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﺘﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪110‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﻠﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ – ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ – ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ‪ Gmail‬ﻭ ‪ Google+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ‪. +‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫> ‪< Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ – Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪112‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ‪ ،MAC‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-P895‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫> ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ <‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ <‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ – ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺳﻨﺘﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪ NFC‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ NFC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ :NFC‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻄﻼ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ <‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻵﺭﺍء ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ – ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ – ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 119
‫> ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ <‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺷﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻼ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ ،PIN‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ِﺬ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸ ّﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ – ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ – ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ – ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ <‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ <‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ – ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Google‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟـ ‪ Google‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ – GPS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺑﺤﺚ ‪ – Google‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ Google‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ <‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ <‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻲ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪.Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ – ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 123
‫> ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ <‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ً‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ <‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ – USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫)ﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪ (MTP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ LG‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(PTP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺄﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ – ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ – ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫> ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ <‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ ‪ LG‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://update.lgmobile.com‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬‬ ‫← ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‬ ‫)‪(OTA‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،OTA‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ .USB‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ‪ LG‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 126
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪DivX HD‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ :DIVX VIDEO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ®‪ DivX‬ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،LLC ،DivX‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Rovi‬‬ ‫‪ .Corporation‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫®‪ Certified‬ﻳﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ www.divx.com‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DIVX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺟﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺟﺮﺓ )‪ (VOD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‪ .
PAGE 127
‫‪DTS‬‬ ‫‪Dolby Mobile‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪5,956,674 :‬؛‬ ‫‪5,974,380‬؛ ‪ 6,487,535‬ﻭﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠّﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ‪ ،DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪DTS 2.0+Digital‬‬ ‫‪ Out‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .DTS, Inc‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ © .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ‪DTS,‬‬ ‫‪.Inc‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪Dolby‬‬ ‫‪ Laboratories.
PAGE 128
‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﻣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ‪ LG Home Panorama‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪.On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ (Polaris Office‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ"‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ(‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻠﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ .On-Screen Phone‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪) .LG-P895‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪Micro‬‬‫‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-P895‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Rubberdium‬ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪/‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ .Rubberdium‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻛﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪130‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ‪Micro-‬‬ ‫‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ /‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Micro-‬‬ ‫‪ً 12~6‬‬ ‫‪ USIM‬ﻟﺪﻯ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪132‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Micro-USIM‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 136
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪134‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ /‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪SMS‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪136‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺗﻠﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎ ًء ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻤّﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 140
PAGE 141
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪ LG-P895‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺑﻴﻨﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ©‪ .LG Electronics، Inc 2012‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ LG .‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ LG Group‬ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‪7 ............‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪20 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪33 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪37 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪39 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪40 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪41 .....‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪41 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪43 ..................................
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪60 .......................Wi-Fi Cast‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪60 .............SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪61 .................... SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ‪66 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪66 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪66 ................................‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ‪66 ...................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪67 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪67 ...........................
PAGE 144
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪78 ............................‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪79 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪79 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪81 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ‪81 .................................‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی ‪82 ............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‪82 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪84 ....................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪87 ................................
PAGE 145
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪99 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪101 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪101 ................................‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪101 .......................‬‬ ‫‪103 .......................... LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪103‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪104 ...... LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪106 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ‪106 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪106 .......
PAGE 146
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪120 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪124 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪126 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪128 ..................‬‬ ‫‪130 ................................... DivX HD‬‬ ‫‪131 ........................................ DTS‬‬ ‫‪132 ............................ Dolby Mobile‬‬ ‫‪133 ................ LG On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ‪133 ...........On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ‪133 ......
PAGE 147
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ )‪.(SAR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ SAR‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺸﺸﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰﻩ‬ ‫)‪ ،(ICNIRP‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺭ ‪ 10‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ DASY4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ‪ 0.284‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ )‪ 10‬ﮔﺮﻡ( ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺪﻥ ‪ 0.604‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ )‪ 10‬ﮔﺮﻡ( ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﻴﺪﺍً ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍ ﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺍً ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 151
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﯽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺮک ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﻟﺐ ﭘﺮﻳﺪﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﯽ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 157
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ‪ LG‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﻤﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﯽء ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 159
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪ +50 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺩﺷﺎﺭژ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪ +45‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺷﺎﺭژ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ -10 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪GPL،‬‬ ‫‪ LGPL، MPL‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪http://opensource.lge.com‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ!‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻓﻀﺎی‬ ‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺎ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ،Gmail‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 163
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ™ Play‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺟﺪی‬ ‫ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ < ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 164
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ PIN ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ‪ 5‬ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 165
‫>ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ<‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 166
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ‪ DRM‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 167
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫< ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪(Suite‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ "‪ "LG PC Suite‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 168
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) Help‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ( ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ "‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪ "Suite‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪ "Suite‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫‪ WINDOW PC Sync‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ "‪ "LG PC Suite‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی "‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪ "Suite‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫)‪ (MTP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .12‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫™‪ Search‬ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 174
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﻤﺪی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 175
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎک ﮐﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮک‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ QuickMenu‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 182
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫< ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ < ﻫﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ PIN ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 183
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ‪/‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 187
‫ﺳﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪ Wi-fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺳﻴﻤﯽ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫‪ NFC‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ‬
PAGE 189
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ Gmail‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ‪Talk‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪49‬‬
PAGE 190
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﭘﺎک ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ "‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ < Gmail‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ "ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ" ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 194
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫< ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 195
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ ،LG-P895‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ Wi-Fi ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫< ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ <‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ‪http://www.android.com/tether‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪:Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 198
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ )‪ (SSID‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ!‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ..‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ،SmartShare‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 201
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫‪ SmartShare‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ‪) DLNA‬ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SmartShare 5‬ﺍﻳﻨﮏ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 203
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫> ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 204
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ‪ DLNA‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ DMP‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪ DLNA‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 206
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻗﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ "‪ "+‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮ < ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 208
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 209
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ‬ ‫‪ PIN2‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 210
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ – ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ – ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ – ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 211
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 212
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺯﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 213
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ < ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ < ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Windows Explorer‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 214
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 215
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﻣﺰﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ ،SMS‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ ١۶٠‬ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﺍی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ‪ SMS‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ SMS ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ MMS‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 216
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 217
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ‪ Gmail‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ POP3، IMAP‬ﻭ ‪.Exchange‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 218
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ < ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫< ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک < ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ < ﺣﺬﻑ < ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 219
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ!‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 220
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 221
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ – ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﭼﻴﺰ – ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ – ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،HDR ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 222
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 223
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‪/‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ – ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ – ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 224
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ – ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ "ﭼﻴﺰ" ﺗﺎ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫– ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 225
‫– ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 226
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 227
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ – ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ – ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 228
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 229
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ – ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 230
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ )ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی‬‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 231
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 232
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ)ﻫﺎی( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 233
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮏ)ﻫﺎی( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 234
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 235
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺟﮏ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 236
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ LG-P895 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 238
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 239
‫‪LG Tag+‬‬ ‫‪ LG Tag+‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪ LG Tag+‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪NFC‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ‪Tag+‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ < ‪LG Tag+‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻣﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ( ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﮓ‬ ‫‪ NFC‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 240
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ!‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 241
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )ﺟﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 242
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫– ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮﮔﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 243
‫‪LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻴﺞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺯﻧﮓ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ "ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ" ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ‪/‬ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺖ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 244
‫‪LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ‪LG‬‬ ‫)‪SmartWorld (www.lgworld.com‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ LG SmartWorld App‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ‪LG‬‬ ‫‪4‬ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ SmartWorld‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪104‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﻓﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 245
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ – ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 246
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ <‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪LG-P895 ،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﭘﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪106‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 247
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )‪،– ،+‬‬ ‫‪ ،x‬ﻳﺎ ÷( ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ = ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪sin،‬‬ ‫‪ cos، tan، log‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫)ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻔﺘﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 248
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪MS Exchange‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ MS outlook‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ MS Office Outlook Web Access‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪MS Exchange‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی < ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪108‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ Microsoft Exchange‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 249
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ Polaris Office‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ‪Microsoft Office‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ Adobe PDF‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ ،Polaris Office‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 250
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺯﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ،LG‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 251
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ < ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ < ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 252
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ < ﻭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ < ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ < ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 253
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫'ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ' ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ < ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 254
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 255
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 256
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺯی – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪Gmail ،‬‬ ‫‪+‬ﻞﮔﻮﮔ ‪ ، ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ Social+ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 257
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ‪< Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi – Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪MAC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ‪ ،MAC‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ MAC‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ LG-P895‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺗﻤﺎﺱ <‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ <‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ – ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 259
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :NFC‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ‪ NFC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ NFC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ :NFC‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪،NFC‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 260
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ – ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫)‪ (APN‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮۀ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭۀ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﮥ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫> ﺻﺪﺍ <‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪120‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 261
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﮥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮ – ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ <‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪122‬‬ ‫> ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ <‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﻳﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 263
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ – ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﮏ – ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ – ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ – ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫>ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ<‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ – ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 264
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ <‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ <‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫> ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی <‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪124‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ(‪.
PAGE 265
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ – ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ <‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ‪ Micro-USIM PIN‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ – ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ – ﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ – ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭی‪.
PAGE 266
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ <‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ – ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 267
‫> ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ <‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻼﮔﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻼﮔﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ <‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ – USB‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪،(MTP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،USB‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ LG‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ (PTP‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ – ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ – ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 268
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ <‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪ http://update.lgmobile.com‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ← ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 269
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ LG :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪(OTA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ،OTA‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ،USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 270
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ‪ -DRM‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 271
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ :DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی‪DivX Video-on-Demand‬‬ ‫‪ ((VOD‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ®‪ DivX‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ،720p‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 272
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ Dolby Mobile Dolby ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬D ‫ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻭ‬Laboratories. Dolby .
PAGE 273
‫‪LG On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ LG Home Panorama‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 274
‫‪LG On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ(‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ (Polaris Office‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 275
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ )‪ LG Home (www.lg.com‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ< ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ < ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫)‪ (LG-P895‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ < ﺭﻭی ‪OSP‬‬ ‫‪ (On-Screen Phone)a‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 276
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ LG-P895‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪Micro‬‬‫‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ LG-P895‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪LG-P895‬‬ ‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 277
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Rubberdium‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‪/‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻮ( ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Rubberdium‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻞ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 278
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی‬ ‫‪Micro‬‬‫‪USIM‬‬ ‫‪138‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫‪ Micro-USIM‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 279
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﺮ ‪ Micro-USIM‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 12‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ Micro-USIM ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 280
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﮐﺪی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪140‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺛﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 281
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Micro-USIM‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ PIN 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 282
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﺪﺕ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪142‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 283
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 284
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪144‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪/‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 285
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 286
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪146‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 287
ENGLISH LG-P895 User Guide This guide helps you to get started using your phone. • Some of the contents of this manual may not apply to your phone, depending on the software and your service provider. • This handset is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due to the touch screen keyboard. • Copyright ©2012 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities.
PAGE 288
Contents Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use ........7 Getting to know your phone ...................19 Device components................................32 QuickMemo ...........................................36 Installing the Micro-USIM card ................38 Charging your phone ..............................39 Locking and unlocking the screen ...........40 Secure your lock screen .........................40 Your Home screen ..................................43 Touch screen tips..........................
PAGE 289
To rename or secure your portable hotspot..................................................59 Using the Wi-Fi Cast...............................60 Enabling Wi-Fi Direct to share through SmartShare ...........................................61 Using SmartShare ..................................62 Calls ........................................................67 Making a call .........................................67 Calling your contacts ..............................67 Answering and rejecting a call .....
PAGE 290
Contents E-mail .....................................................78 Managing an email account....................78 Email account screen .............................79 Working with account folders ..................80 Composing and sending email ................80 Shooting a quick video ...........................89 After shooting a video ............................89 Using the advanced settings ...................90 Adjusting the volume when viewing a video ..........................................
PAGE 291
Transferring music ﬁles using USB mass storage devices .....................................97 Playing a song .......................................97 LG Tag+ ................................................99 Media Home ........................................100 Notebook ..............................................101 Making a note .....................................101 Getting to know the Notebook ...............101 LG SmartWorld......................................
PAGE 292
Contents Using the web toolbar ..........................114 Using options.......................................115 Settings ................................................116 WIRELESS & NETWORKS......................116 DEVICE................................................119 PERSONAL ..........................................123 SYSTEM ..............................................125 Phone software update ........................126 DivX HD...............................................129 DTS .......
PAGE 293
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information. This mobile phone model LG-P895 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 294
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • The SAR limit recommended by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is 2 W/kg averaged over 10g of tissue. • The highest SAR value for this model phone tested by DASY4 for use at the ear is 0.284 W/kg (10g) and when worn on the body is 0.604 W/Kg (10g). • This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body.
PAGE 295
Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.
PAGE 296
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Switch off the phone in any area where you are required to by special regulations. For example, do not use your phone in hospitals as it may affect sensitive medical equipment. • Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause an electric shock and can seriously damage your phone. • Do not charge a handset near flammable material as the handset can become hot and create a fire hazard.
PAGE 297
• Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture. • Use accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. • Do not use, touch or attempt to remove or fix broken, chipped or cracked glass. Damage to the glass display due to abuse or misuse is not covered under the warranty. • Your phone is an electronic device that generates heat during normal operation.
PAGE 298
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Efficient phone operation Road safety Electronics devices All mobile phones may receive interference, which could affect performance. • Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers, for example, in your breast pocket. • Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. • Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs etc.
PAGE 299
portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance. • If you are listening to music whilst out and about, please ensure that the volume is at a reasonable level so that you are aware of your surroundings. This is of particular importance when near roads. Avoid damage to your hearing Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time.
PAGE 300
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Glass Parts Blasting area Some parts of your mobile device are made of glass. This glass could break if your mobile device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your mobile device until the glass is replaced by an authorised service provider. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions and follow any regulations or rules.
PAGE 301
In aircraft Emergency calls Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. • Turn your mobile phone off before boarding any aircraft. • Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew. Emergency calls may not be available on all mobile networks. Therefore you should never depend solely on your phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children.
PAGE 302
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximise the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximise usability.
PAGE 303
• Always unplug the charger from the wall socket after the phone is fully charged to save unnecessary power consumption of the charger. • Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions. • Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal’s teeth or nails, come into contact with the battery. This could cause a fire.
PAGE 304
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Regulatory and Safety Go to "System settings > About phone > Regulatory and Safety" to get regulatory and safety information Ambient temperatures Max: +50°C (discharging), +45°C (charging) Min: -10°C 18 Notice: Open Source Software To obtain the corresponding source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licences, please visit http://opensource.lge.com/ All referred licence terms, disclaimers and notices are available for download with the source code.
PAGE 305
Getting to know your phone Please check to see whether any problems you encountered with your phone are described in this section before taking the phone for service or calling a service representative. 1. Phone memory When there is less than 10% of space available in your phone memory, your phone cannot receive new messages. You need to check your phone memory and delete some data, such as applications or messages, to make more memory available.
PAGE 306
Getting to know your phone Before you start using the phone, please read this! Extending your phone's battery life: • Turn off radio communications you are not using. If you are not using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or GPS, turn them off. • Reduce screen brightness and set a shorter screen timeout. • Turn off automatic syncing for Gmail, Calendar, Contacts and other applications. • Some applications you have downloaded may reduce battery power.
PAGE 307
Battery usage time is displayed at the bottom of the screen. It tells you how long it has been since you last connected your phone to a power source or, if currently connected, how long the phone was last running on battery power. The screen shows the applications or services using battery power, listed in order from the greatest to smallest amount used. 3. Using folders You can combine several app icons in a folder. Drop one app icon over another on a home screen, and the two icons will be combined. 4.
PAGE 308
Getting to know your phone WARNING To protect your phone and personal data, only download applications from trusted sources, such as Play Store™. If there are improperly installed applications on your phone, it may not work normally or a serious error may occur. You must uninstall those applications and all associated data and settings from the phone. 22 5. Using unlock pattern Set unlock pattern to secure your phone. Touch > Apps tab > Settings > Lock screen from DEVICE > Select screen lock > Pattern.
PAGE 309
WARNING Precautions to take when using pattern lock. It is very important to remember the unlock pattern you set. You will not be able to access your phone if you use an incorrect pattern 5 times. You have 5 opportunities to enter your unlock pattern, PIN or password. If you have used all 5 opportunities, you can try again after 30 seconds.
PAGE 310
Getting to know your phone < If you have forgotten PIN or Password > If you forgot your PIN or Password, you need to do hard reset. Caution: If you perform a hard reset, all user applications and user data are deleted. Note: If you have not logged in Google Account and forgot Unlock Pattern, you need to enter Backup PIN. 24 6. Using the hard reset (Factory reset) If your phone does not restore to the original condition, use a Hard Reset (Factory Reset) to initialise it. 1 Turn the power off.
PAGE 311
5 Scroll the list by Volume keys and select it by Power/Lock key. WARNING If you perform a Hard Reset, all user applications, user data and DRM licenses will be deleted. Please remember to back up any important data before performing a Hard Reset. 7. Opening and switching applications Multitasking is easy with Android because you can keep more than one application running at the same time. There's no need to quit an application before opening another. Use and switch between several open applications.
PAGE 312
Getting to know your phone To return to view list recently used applications: Simply press Recent apps key To stop applications: 1 Touch > Apps tab > Settings > Apps > Running 2 Scroll and touch the desired application and touch Stop to stop it. 26 8. Installing PC Software (LG PC Suite) "LG PC Suite" PC Application is a program that helps you connect your device to a PC via an USB cable and Wi-Fi. Once connected, you can use the functions of your device from your PC.
PAGE 313
• Synchronises data (schedules, contacts, bookmarks) in your device and PC. • Backup the applications in your device. • Update the softwares in your device. • Backup and restore the device. • Play multimedia contents of your PC from your device. NOTE: You can use the Help menu from the application to find out how to use your "LG PC Suite" PC application. Installing "LG PC Suite" PC Application "LG PC Suite" PC application can be downloaded from the webpage of LG. 1 Go to www.lg.
PAGE 314
Getting to know your phone WINDOW PC Sync Download to download "LG PC Suite" PC software. System Requirements for "LG PC Suite" PC software • OS: Windows XP 32 bit(Service pack 2), Windows Vista 32 bit/64 bit, Windows 7 32 bit/64 bit • CPU: 1 GHz or higher processors • Memory: 512 MB or higher RAM • Graphic card: 1024 x 768 resolution, 32 bit color or higher • HDD: 100 MB or more free hard disk space (More free hard disk space may be needed 28 depending on the volume of data stored.
PAGE 315
9. Synchronising your phone to a Computer Data from your device and PC can be synchronised easily with "LG PC Suite" PC application for your convenience. Contacts, schedules, and bookmarks can be synchronised. The procedure is as follows: 1 Connect your device to PC. (Use an USB cable or Wi-Fi connection.) 2 After connection, run the program and select the device section from the category on the left side of the screen. 3 Click [Personal information] to select.
PAGE 316
Getting to know your phone 1 Touch > Apps tab > Settings > Storage from the DEVICE to check out the storage media. 2 Connect the phone to your PC using the USB cable. 3 USB connection type list will appear in your phone screen, and select Media sync (MTP) option. 4 Open the memory folder on your PC. You can view the mass storage content on your PC and transfer the ﬁles. 5 Copy the ﬁles from your PC to the drive folder. 30 6 Select Charge only option to disconnect the phone.
PAGE 317
While making/receiving calls or sending/ receiving data, avoid holding the lower part of the phone where the antenna is located. Doing so may affect call quality. 12. When the screen freezes If the screen freezes or the phone does not respond when you try to operate it: Press and hold the Power/Lock key for 10 seconds to turn it off. If it still does not work, please contact the service centre.
PAGE 318
Getting to know your phone Device components Earpiece Proximity sensor Camera lens Home key Return to the home screen from any screen. Back key Return to the previous screen. 32 Power/Lock key • Switch your phone on/off by pressing and holding this key. • Short press to lock/unlock the screen. Recent app key View the recently used application list. Menu key • Check what options are available. • Go to Google Search™ by pressing and holding this key.
PAGE 319
NOTE: Proximity sensor When receiving and making calls, the proximity sensor automatically turns the backlight off and locks the touch screen by sensing when the phone is near your ear. This extends battery life and prevents you from unintentionally activating the touch screen during calls. WARNING Placing a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage the LCD and touch screen functions. Do not cover the LCD proximity sensor with protective film. This could cause the sensor to malfunction.
PAGE 320
Getting to know your phone Volume keys • In the home screen: Control ringer volume. • During a call: Control your earpiece volume. • When playing a track: Control volume continuously.
PAGE 321
Camera lens Flash WARNING Encloses the battery compartment. Please do not open the back cover.
PAGE 322
Getting to know your phone QuickMemo Use QuickMemo to practically and efficiently create memos during a call, with a saved picture or on the current phone screen. 1 Enter the QuickMemo screen by pressing QuickMemo Hotkey 2 Select the desired menu option from Pen type, Colour, Eraser, and create a memo. 36 3 Touch to Save the memo with the current screen. Select the Location whether Notebook or gallery.
PAGE 323
NOTE: Please use a fingertip while using the QuickMemo function. Do not use your fingernail. Using the QuickMemo options While using the QuickMemo function, you can easily use the QuickMenu options. – Select if you want to use the background screen or not. – Send or share the current QuickMemo to others. – Save the memo with the current screen. Viewing the saved QuickMemo Touch Gallery and select the QuickMemo album or Touch Notebook and select the QuickMemo note. – Undo or Redo.
PAGE 324
Getting to know your phone Installing the Micro-USIM card Before you can start exploring your new phone, you'll need to set it up. To insert the Micro-USIM card: 1 Open the Micro-USIM card slot Cover by Pin. 2 Slide the Micro-USIM card into the Micro-USIM card slot. Make sure the Gold contact area on the card is facing downwards.
PAGE 325
Charging your phone The charger connector is at the top of the phone. Insert the charger and plug it into an electrical outlet. NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime.
PAGE 326
Getting to know your phone Locking and unlocking the screen If you do not use the phone for a while, the screen is turned off and locked automatically. This helps to prevent accidental touches and saves battery power. When you are not using the LG-P895, press to lock your phone. the Power/Lock key If there are any programs running when you set lock screen, they may be still running in Lock mode. It is recommended that you exit all programs before entering Lock mode to avoid 40 unnecessary charges (e.g.
PAGE 327
To set an Unlock Pattern, PIN or Password for the first time: > Apps tab > Settings > Lock • Touch screen > Select screen lock > None, Swipe, Face Unlock, Pattern, PIN or Password. NOTE: Precautions to take when using pattern lock. It is very important to remember the unlock pattern you set. You will not be able to access your phone if you use an incorrect pattern 5 times. You have 5 opportunities to enter your unlock pattern, PIN or password.
PAGE 328
Getting to know your phone When you cannot recall your unlock pattern: If you logged in to your Google account on the phone but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times, tap the Forgot pattern button. You are then required to log in with your Google account to unlock your phone. If you have not created a Google account on the phone or you forgot it, you have to perform a hard reset.
PAGE 329
Your Home screen Touch screen tips Here are some tips on how to navigate around your phone. Touch – To choose a menu/option or open an application, touch it. Touch and hold – To open an options menu or grab an object you want to move, touch and hold it. Drag – To scroll through a list or move slowly, drag across the touch screen. Flick – To scroll through a list or move quickly, flick across the touch screen (drag quickly and release). NOTE: • To select an item, touch the centre of the icon.
PAGE 330
Your Home screen Home Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to view the panels. You can customise each panel with Apps, Downloads, Widgets and wallpapers. NOTE: Some screen images may be different depending on your phone provider. On your home screen, you can view menu icons at the bottom of the screen. Menu icons provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. 44 Touch the Phone icon to bring up the touch screen dialpad to make a call.
PAGE 331
application, simply touch the icon in the applications list. Customising the Home screen You can customise your home screen by adding Apps, Downloads, Widgets or Wallpapers. For more convenience using your phone, add your favourite apps and widgets to the home screen. To add items on your home screen: 1 Touch and hold the empty part of the home screen. at the top of the right side. Or touch 2 In the Add Mode menu, select items you want to add. You will then see added items on the home screen.
PAGE 332
Your Home screen Returning to recently-used applications 1 Touch the Recent app key. The screen displays a pop-up with icons of applications you used recently. 2 Touch an icon to open the application. Or touch the Back key to return to your previous screen. Notification drawer The notification drawer runs across the top of your screen. 46 Touch and slide the notification drawer down with your finger. Touch > to manage the Notifications.
PAGE 333
Airplane mode, Auto-rotate screen, Brightness, Data enabled or Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Viewing the status bar The status bar uses different icons to display phone information such as signal strength, new messages, battery life, active Bluetooth and data connections. Icon Description No Micro-USIM card No signal Airplane mode Connected to a Wi-Fi network Below is a table explaining the meaning of icons you're likely to see in the status bar.
PAGE 334
Your Home screen Icon 48 Description Icon Description Call in progress Bluetooth is on Call hold System warning Speakerphone Alarm is set Phone microphone is muted New voicemail Missed call Ringer is silenced
PAGE 335
Icon Description Icon Description NFC is on Downloading data Vibrate mode Uploading data Battery fully charged GPS is acquiring Battery is charging Receiving location data from GPS Phone is connected to PC via USB cable Data is syncing 49
PAGE 336
Your Home screen Icon Description Description New Gmail Portable Wi-Fi hotspot is active New Google Talk message Both USB tethering and portable hotspot are active New message Song is playing USB tethering is active 50 Icon
PAGE 337
Onscreen keyboard You can enter text using the onscreen keyboard. The onscreen keyboard appears automatically on the screen when you need to enter text. To manually display the keyboard, simply touch a text field where you want to enter text. Using the keypad & entering text Tap once to capitalise the next letter you type. Double-tap for all caps. Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. You can also touch and hold this tab to view the Settings menu. Tap to enter a space.
PAGE 338
Your Home screen "a" key until the zoom-in key grows bigger and displays characters from different languages. Then select the special character you want.
PAGE 339
Google account set up When you first turn on your phone, you have the opportunity to activate the network, to sign into your Google Account and how you want to use some Google services. To set up your Google account: • Sign into a Google Account from the prompted set up screen. OR • Touch > Apps tab > select a Google application, such as Gmail > select New to create a new account. If you have a Google account, touch Existing, enter your email address and password, then touch Sign in.
PAGE 340
Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi With Wi-Fi, you can use high-speed Internet access within the coverage of the wireless access point [WAP]. Enjoy wireless Internet using Wi-Fi, without extra charges. Connecting to Wi-Fi networks To use Wi-Fi on your phone, you need to access a wireless access point or "hotspot". Some access points are open and you can simply connect to them. Others are hidden or use security features, you must configure your phone to be able to connect to them.
PAGE 341
3 Tap Wi-Fi menu again to see a list of active and in-range Wi-Fi networks. • Secured networks are indicated by a lock icon. 4 Touch a network to connect to it. • If the network is secured, you are prompted to enter a password or other credentials. (Ask your network administrator for details) 5 After connecting to a Wi-Fi network, the status bar displays icon that indicate Wi-Fi status. Bluetooth You can use Bluetooth to send data by running a corresponding application as on most other mobile phones.
PAGE 342
Connecting to Networks and Devices TIP! With LG-P895, you can enjoy Bluetooth high speed. If the device you want to share files which also supports high speed Bluetooth, the files will automatically be transferred via the high-speed network. To use Bluetooth high speed data transfer, please make sure the Wi-Fi is OFF on your devices before use. The settings for Bluetooth high speed may be different depends on the device. Please check the device's settings with their service provider.
PAGE 343
again. 3 Choose the device you want to pair up with from the list. Once the paring is successful, your device will connect to the device. Sending pictures using Bluetooth 1 Select a Picture > > Bluetooth 2 Check whether Bluetooth is ON, then select Search for devices. 3 Choose the device you want to send data to from the list. Sharing your phone's data connection USB tethering and portable Wi-Fi hotspot are great features when there are no wireless connections available.
PAGE 344
Connecting to Networks and Devices bar and as an ongoing notification in the notifications drawer. For the latest information about tethering and portable hotspots, including supported operating systems and other details, visit http:// www.android.com/tether.
PAGE 345
To rename or secure your portable hotspot You can change the name of your phone's Wi-Fi network name (SSID) and secure its Wi-Fi network. 1 On the home screen, touch > Apps tab > Settings 2 Touch More from the WIRELESS & NETWORKS and select Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. 3 Ensure Portable Wi-Fi hotspot is ticked. 4 Touch Conﬁgure Wi-Fi hotspot. • The Configure Wi-Fi hotspot dialog box will open. • You can change the network SSID (name) that other computers or devices see when scanning for Wi-Fi networks.
PAGE 346
Connecting to Networks and Devices hotspot with a computer or other device. You can set Open in the Security menu to remove security from your Wi-Fi network. 5 Touch Save. ATTENTION! If you set the security option as Open, you cannot prevent unauthorised usage of online services by other people and additional charges can be incurred. To avoid unauthorised usage, you are advised to keep the security option active.
PAGE 347
3 Select a device to connect from the scanned device list. 4 Touch Connect. Enabling Wi-Fi Direct to share through SmartShare Wi-Fi Direct automatically scans nearby Wi-Fi Direct devices and the searched devices are listed as they are found and you can select a specific device to share multimedia data through SmartShare. Wi-Fi Direct cannot be enabled while using other Wi-Fi functions.
PAGE 348
Connecting to Networks and Devices NOTE: When your phone becomes a group owner, it will consume more battery power than when it is a client. Wi-Fi Direct connection does not provide Internet service. Additional costs may be incurred when connecting and using online services. Check data charges with your network provider. 62 Using SmartShare SmartShare uses DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) technology to share digital content through a wireless network.
PAGE 349
• Touch Always accept request if you would like to automatically accept sharing requests from other devices. • Touch Receive files if you would like to allow the other devices to upload media files to my phone. 4 Under the My shared contents section, touch to checkmark the types of content you would like to share. Choose from Pictures, Videos, and Music. 5 SmartShare is now activated and ready to share contents. To control your renderer devices Let your renderer device (e.g.
PAGE 350
Connecting to Networks and Devices 4 You can browse the content library. 5 Touch and hold a content thumbnail and ﬂick them to the top area with your ﬁnger or touch the Menu Key > Play. To share contents from your phone to your renderer device (e.g. TV) NOTE: Make sure that your renderer device is properly configured. 1 While watching your pictures or videos using the Gallery application, touch tab / on the Title area.
PAGE 351
NOTICE: Check that your device is connected with your home network using Wi-Fi connection to use this application. Some DLNA enabled devices (e.g. TV) support only the DMP feature of DLNA and will not appear in the renderer device list. Your device might not be able to play some contents. To download contents from the remote content library 1 Touch > Apps tab > SmartShare . 2 Touch the From button and select the device of the remote content library. 3 You can browse the content library.
PAGE 352
Connecting to Networks and Devices To upload contents from the remote content library NOTE: Make sure that the internal storage is correctly mounted and the Receive files option in the Settings menu is checked. 1 Touch > Apps tab > SmartShare . 2 Touch the From button and select My phone. 3 You can browse the local content library. 4 Touch and hold a content thumbnail and then touch Upload. 66 5 Select the device of the remote content library to be uploaded.
PAGE 353
Calls Making a call Calling your contacts 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Enter the number using the keypad. To delete a digit, touch the . 3 Touch to make a call. 4 To end a call, touch the End icon . 1 Touch to open your contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list or enter the ﬁrst few letters of the contact you want to call by touching Search contacts. 3 In the list, touch the contact twice or touch you want to call. TIP! To enter "+" to make international calls, touch and hold .
PAGE 354
Calls Hold and slide the Quick msg icon from the bottom if you want to send a message. TIP! Quick msg You can send a message quickly using this function. This is useful if you need to reject a call with message during a meeting. Adjusting call volume To adjust the in-call volume during a call, use the Volume up and down keys on the left-hand side of the phone. 68 Making a second call 1 During your ﬁrst call, touch Menu > Add call and dial the number.
PAGE 355
Home Key and slide the notiﬁcation bar down and select End call icon . NOTE: You are charged for each call you make. Viewing your call logs On the home screen, touch and choose the Call logs tab . View a complete list of all dialled, received and missed calls. TIP! Touch any call log entry to view the date, time and duration of the call. TIP! Press the Menu key, then touch Delete all to delete all the recorded items.
PAGE 356
Calls 1 On the home screen, touch . 2 Touch menu. 3 Tap Call settings and choose the options that you want to adjust. Fixed dialing numbers – To turn on and compile a list of numbers that can be called from your phone. You’ll need your PIN2, which is available from your operator. Only numbers within the fixed dial list can be called from your phone. Voicemail service – Allows you to select your carrier’s voicemail service.
PAGE 357
Call forwarding – Choose whether to divert all calls, when the line is busy, when there is no answer or when you have no signal. Call barring – Select when you would like calls to be barred. Enter the call barring password. Please check with your network operator about this service. Call duration – View the duration of calls including Last call, All calls, Dialled calls and received calls. Call costs – View the charges applied to your calls.
PAGE 358
Contacts In the home screen 1 Touch to open your contacts. 2 Touch Search contacts and enter the contact name using the keyboard. Contacts > Create new contact. 2 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, touch the image area. Choose from Take photo or Select from Gallery. 3 Select the contact type by touching . 4 Touch a category of contact information and enter the details about your contact. 5 Touch Save.
PAGE 359
Adding a contact to your favourites 1 Touch to open your contacts. 2 Touch a contact to view their details. 3 Touch the star to the right of the contact's name. The star turns yellow color. Removing a contact from your favourites list 1 Touch to open your contacts. 2 Touch the tab, and choose a contact to view its details. 3 Touch the yellow color star to the right of the contact's name. The star turns grey and the contact is removed from your favourites.
PAGE 360
Contacts 4 On the popup, click the Select a ﬁle and Windows Explorer will appear. 5 Select the contacts ﬁle to import in Windows Explorer and click the Open. 6 Click OK. 7 A Field mapping popup to link the contacts in your device and new contacts data will appear. 8 If there is a conﬂict between the data in your PC contacts and device contacts, make the necessary selections or modiﬁcations in LG PC Suite. 9 Click OK.
PAGE 361
Messaging Your LG-P895 combines SMS and MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. Sending a message 1 Touch on the home screen, and touch to open a blank message. 2 Enter a contact name or contact number in the To ﬁeld. As you enter the contact name, matching contacts appear. You can touch a suggested recipient. You can add multiple contacts. NOTE: You will be charged for a text message for every person you send the message to. 3 Touch Enter message ﬁeld and start to compose your message.
PAGE 362
Messaging 5 Touch Send to send your message. 6 Responses appear on the screen. As you view and send additional messages, a message thread is created. WARNING: The 160-character limit may vary from country to country depending on the language and how the SMS is coded. 76 WARNING: If an image, video or audio file is added to an SMS message, it is automatically converted into an MMS message and you are charged accordingly.
PAGE 363
Using Smilies Liven up your messages using Smilies. When writing a new message, press the Menu key, then choose Insert smiley. Changing your message settings Your LG-P895 message settings are predefined, so you can send messages immediately. You can change the settings based on your preferences. 1 Touch Messaging icon on the home screen, and touch the Menu key, then tap Settings.
PAGE 364
E-mail You can use the Email application to read emails from services like Gmail. The Email application supports the following account types: POP3, IMAP and Exchange. Your service provider or system administrator can provide the account settings you need. Managing an email account The first time you open the E-mail application, a setup wizard opens to help you to set up an email account.
PAGE 365
account > touch an account you want to delete > Delete > OK Email account screen You can touch an account to view its Inbox. The account from which you send email by default is indicated with a tick. – Touch to open your Combined Inbox, with messages sent to all of your accounts. Messages in the Combined Inbox are colour coded on the left, by account, using the same colours used for your accounts in the Accounts screen. – Touch the folder icon to open the account folders.
PAGE 366
E-mail Working with account folders Each account has an Inbox, Outbox, Sent and Drafts folder. Depending on the features supported by your account's service provider, you may have additional folders. Composing and sending email To compose and send a message 1 While in the E-mail application, touch the . 2 Enter an address for the message's intended recipient. As you enter text, matching addresses are offered from your 80 Contacts. Separate multiple addresses with semicolon.
PAGE 367
TIP! When a new email arrives in the inbox, you will receive a notification by sound or vibration. Tap the email notification to stop notifications.
PAGE 368
Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera – Switch between the rear–facing camera lens and the front–facing camera lens. Cheese shutter – Say Cheese when you get ready to take a photo. Time catch shot – Touch this icon to capture the missing moment before pressing the shutter. Shot mode – Choose from Normal, HDR, Panorama or Continuous shot. Settings – Touch this icon to open the Settings menu. Video mode – Touch this icon to switch to video mode.
PAGE 369
Taking a quick photo 1 Open the Camera application. 2 Hold the phone, point the lens towards the subject you want to photograph. 3 Touch the screen and a focus box will appear in the viewﬁnder screen. 4 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject. 5 Click on the to capture the photo. Once you've taken the photo Touch to view the last photo you captured. Touch to share your photo via Bluetooth, E-mail, Gmail, Google+, Memo, Messaging, Picasa and Social+.
PAGE 370
Camera Move – Touch to move the photo to other place. Rename – Touch to edit the name of the selected picture. Rotate left/right – To rotate left or right. Crop – Crop your photo. Move your finger across the screen to select the area. Edit – View and edit the picture. Select the photo resolution. If you choose the high resolution, the file size will increase, which means you will be able to store fewer photos in the memory. 84 Improves colour qualities in different lighting conditions.
PAGE 371
– Touch if you want to change the viewfinder menu. – Switch between the rear–facing camera lens and the front–facing camera lens. – Say Cheese when you get ready to take a photo. – Touch this icon to capture the missing moment before pressing the shutter. – Choose from Normal, HDR, Panorama or Continuous shot. – Allows you to turn on the flash when taking a photo in dark conditions. – Zoom in or out – This defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the photo. – Focuses on the specific spot.
PAGE 372
Camera ISO, the more sensitive the camera is. This is useful in darker conditions when you cannot use the flash. – Improves colour qualities in different lighting conditions. – Applies artistic effects to the pictures. – Set a delay after the capture button is pressed. This is ideal if you want to be in the photo. – Activate to use your phone's locationbased services. Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location.
PAGE 373
TIP! When you exit the camera, some settings return to their defaults, such as white balance, colour tone, timer and shot mode. Check these before you take your next photo. TIP! The Settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder so, when you change elements of the photo colour or quality, you see a preview of the image change behind the Settings menu.
PAGE 374
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera – Switch between the rear–facing camera lens and the front-facing camera lens. Zoom – Zoom in or out. Brightness – This defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the video. Live effect – Live effect provides various visual effects when taking a video. Settings – Touch this icon to open the settings menu. Camera mode – Touch this icon to switch to camera mode. Start recording Gallery – Touch to view the last video you recorded.
PAGE 375
Shooting a quick video 1 Open the camera application and touch video mode button. 2 The video camera viewﬁnder appears on the screen. 3 Holding the phone, point the lens towards the subject you want to capture in your video. 4 Press the Record button once to start recording. 5 A red light appears at the top corner of the viewﬁnder with a timer showing the length of the video. Tip! – Touch to capture image during recording a video. 6 Touch on the screen to stop recording.
PAGE 376
Video camera Touch to delete the video you just made. Confirm by touching OK. The viewfinder reappears. Touch to open the options. Move – Touch to move the video to other place. Rename – Tap to edit the name of the selected video. Details – Tap to see a detailed information, such as the name, date, time, size and type. 90 Using the advanced settings Using the viewfinder, touch to open all the advanced options. – Touch if you want to change the viewfinder menu.
PAGE 377
– Allows you to turn on the flash when taking a video in dark conditions. – Touch to set the size (in pixels) of the video you are recording. – Improves colour qualities in different lighting conditions. – Choose a colour tone to use for your new view. – Activate to use your phone's locationbased services. – Choose Off to record a video without sound. – Auto review automatically shows you the video you just recorded. – Restore all video camera default settings.
PAGE 378
Video Wiz You can make your own movie using your images/video and music. 1 From the Home Screen, touch the Apps Key > Video Wiz . 2 Select the desired options to create a movie.
PAGE 379
• • • • Add Media – Touch this icon add images and/or video to your movie. Touch Images to add images, then touch the image(s) you want to add. Touch Videos to add video footage, then touch the video(s) you want to add. to exit after all of the media Touch Done files have been added. Delete Media – Touch this icon to remove the selected image(s) and/or video(s). Touch an image or video in the added media contents section, touch Delete Media , then touch Delete selected (or Delete all).
PAGE 380
Video Wiz • Swipe left and right to select the footage to edit. to insert • Touch the Overlay Text icon text. • Touch the Overlay Image icon to insert selected graphic(s). to trim • Touch the Trim Video icon segments from your video footage. to exit when you’re • Touch the Done icon finished editing. Add Music – Touch this button to set the background music. 94 Preview – Touch this icon to play your movie. Help – Touch this icon to view information on how to use the Video Wiz application.
PAGE 381
Multimedia You can store multimedia files on an internal memory for easy access to all your multimedia files. Video Player Your LG-P895 has a built-in video player that lets you play all your favourite videos. To access > Apps tab > the video player, Touch Video Player. Playing a video 1 In the home screen, touch > Video Player. > Apps tab 2 Select the video you want to play. Touch to pause playback a video. Touch to resume playback a video. Touch to go 10 seconds forward.
PAGE 382
Multimedia Touch to set Dolby audio effect when connected with headset jack. Touch Speed controller icon and drag the progress bar to control playback speed. Touch Preview frame icon and drag the handler of seek bar to explore the content with a preview screen. Touch to lock a video screen. 96 Touch the direct list icon to see the list of videos. To change the volume while watching video, press the up and down volume keys on the right hand side of the phone. Touch and hold any video in the list.
PAGE 383
Music Player Your LG-P895 has a built-in music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks. To access the music player, Touch > Apps tab > Music Player. Transferring music files using USB mass storage devices 1 Connect the LG-P895 to a PC using a USB cable. 2 If you haven't installed LG Android Platform Driver on your PC, you need to change the settings manually. Choose Settings > Connectivity > USB connection type, then select Media sync (MTP).
PAGE 384
Multimedia Touch to resume playback. Touch to set shuffle mode. Touch to skip to the next track in the album, playlist. Touch to see the current playlist. Touch to go back to the beginning of the song. Touch twice to return to the previous song. Touch to manage the music volume. Touch to set repeat mode. 98 Touch to see lyrics. This option is on only if the song includes the lyrics. To change the volume while listening to music, press the up and down volume keys on the right-hand side of the phone.
PAGE 385
NOTE: Music file copyrights may be protected by international treaties and national copyright laws. Therefore, it may be necessary to obtain permission or a licence to reproduce or copy music. In some countries, national laws prohibit private copying of copyrighted material. Before downloading or copying the file, check the national laws of the relevant country concerning the use of such material.
PAGE 386
Multimedia Using Tag+ reading When touching the set tag, mode will be activated right away. Media Home Using media home 1 Touch > Apps tab > Media Home 2 Select the desired function among of videos, photos, music. Setting media home 1 Touch > Apps tab > Media Home > Settings 100 2 You can change the settings based on your preferences.
PAGE 387
Notebook With Notebook application, you can manage and personalize a wide variety of information. Getting to know the Notebook Making a note 1 Touch > Apps tab > Notebook. 2 Touch New note to create a new note. 3 Select the desired mode(Cover, Title, Paper, Paper colour) and OK.
PAGE 388
Notebook – Select the Read only or edit mode. – Undo or Redo. – Tap this button to write. – Select the Pen type, Thickness, Opacity and Colour. – Erase the memo that you created. – Touch to attach the files using Picture, Capture picture, Video, Capture video, Audio, Record voice, Location, Sticker and Date and time. – Share the current note to others via Gmail, E-mail, Social+, Bluetooth, Messaging, Picasa, Google+, Memo. 102 – Save the note with the current screen.
PAGE 389
LG SmartWorld LG SmartWorld offers an assortment of exciting content - games, applications, wallpaper and ringtones - giving LG phone users the chance to enjoy richer "Mobile Life" experiences. How to Get to LG SmartWorld from Your Phone 1 Touch > Apps tab >Tap the icon to access LG SmartWorld. 2 Tap Sign in and enter ID/PW for LG SmartWorld. If you have not yet signed up, tap Register and get a LG SmartWorld membership. 3 Download the content you want.
PAGE 390
LG SmartWorld How to use LG SmartWorld • Participate in monthly LG SmartWorld promotions. – Search Content. – Find contents by category(e.g. Games, Education, Entertainment etc). – List of downloaded/to-be updated contents. • Try the easy "Menu" buttons to find what you’re looking for fast. Apps for you – Recommended content based on your previous choices. 104 Settings – Set Profile and Display. Sign in – Set your ID and Password. • Try other useful functions as well.
PAGE 391
Utilities Setting your alarm 1 Touch > Apps tab > Alarm/Clock > . 2 After you set the alarm, the LG-P895 lets you know how much time is left before the alarm will invoke. 3 Set Repeat, Snooze duration, Vibration, Alarm sound, Puzzle lock and Memo. Touch Save. NOTE: To change alarm settings on alarm list screen, touch the Menu key and select Settings. You can adjust the below options: Alarm in silent mode, Alarm volume, Side button behavior and Puzzle lock option.
PAGE 392
Utilities 4 For more complex calculations, touch , select the Advanced panel, then choose sin, cos, tan, log and so on. 5 To check history tap the icon Adding an event to your calendar 1 Touch > Apps tab > Calendar 2 On the screen, you can ﬁnd the different view types of the Calendar (Day, Week, Month, Agenda). 3 Tap on the date you want to add event on and touch . 106 4 Touch Event name then enter the event name. 5 Touch Location and enter the location.
PAGE 393
Tasks Polaris Office This task can be synchronized with MS Exchange account. You can create task, revise it and delete it in MS outlook or MS Office Outlook Web Access. To Synchronize MS Exchange 1 From the Home Screen, Touch > Settings. 2 Touch Accounts & sync > ADD ACCOUNT. 3 Touch Microsoft Exchange to create Email address and Password. 4 Make sure if you checkmark Sync task.
PAGE 394
Utilities Viewing files Mobile users can now easily view a wide variety of file types, including Microsoft Office documents and Adobe PDF, right on their mobile devices. When viewing documents using Polaris Office, the objects and layout remain the same as in their original documents. FileShare This feature allows you to share files from your phone. 1 Touch > FileShare 2 Choose the types of content you would 108 like to share. Choose from Images, Videos, Music and Document.
PAGE 395
This Backup application support between LG smart phones, other S/W version or OS. And so, when you buy the new LG smart phone, you can back up the current LG-P895 smart phone data on your new one.
PAGE 396
Utilities Back up your smart phone data Scheduling automatic backups 1 Touch > Apps tab > and then select Backup > Backup > Internal Storage. 2 Touch the Add new to enter a name for your backup ﬁle, and then select Continue. 3 Select the check box next to the item you want to back up, and then select Continue to back up. 4 When all selected ﬁles backed up, you will see the message ‘Done’ and select Continue to ﬁnish backing up data.
PAGE 397
4 Select the check box next to the data you want to back up, and then select Continue to ﬁnish the schedule set. Restoring smart phone data To restore data that is in your on-board device memory, mass storage mode must be turned off. NOTE: All files that are stored on your smart phone are deleted before the backup file is restored. 1 Touch > Apps tab > and then select Backup > Restore > Internal Storage. 2 On the Restore screen, select a backup ﬁle that contains the data you want to restore.
PAGE 398
Utilities 2 When all selected ﬁles restored, you will see the message ‘Done’ and select Yes to restart the phone. NOTE: • While in Mass storage mode, this Backup Application cannot be functioned. Select Charge only option when the USB cable is connected. • You can set Enable encryption to encrypt your backup files for extra protection. 112 Press the Menu from the Backup screen, and select Settings > Security > Enable encryption and select the check box.
PAGE 399
NOTE: You can also enable automatic delete old backups and only keep the most recent backup. Press the Menu from the Backup screen, and select Settings > Scheduled backup > Auto delete old backups to select the number of scheduled backups to keep.
PAGE 400
The web Internet Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world of games, music, news, sport, entertainment and much more, right on your mobile phone. Wherever you are and whatever you enjoy. NOTE: Additional charges apply when connecting to these services and downloading content. Check data charges with your network provider. 114 Using the web toolbar Touch to go back a page. Touch to go forward a page, to the page you connected to after the current one.
PAGE 401
Using options Press to view options. Refresh – Update the current web page. Save to bookmarks – Add the current web page as bookmark. Go to Homepage – Allow you to go to a homepage. Share page – Allows you to share the web page with others via Bluetooth, E-mail, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Social+. Find on page – Allows you to find letters or words on the current web page. Request desktop site – Allows you to view the web page as desktop.
PAGE 402
Settings In the home screen, touch Settings. > Apps tab > WIRELESS & NETWORKS Here, you can manage Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. You can also set up mobile networks and switch to airplane mode. < Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi – Turns on Wi-Fi to connect to available Wi-Fi networks. 116 TIP! How to obtain the MAC address To set up a connection in some wireless networks with MAC filters, you may need to enter the MAC address of your LG-P895 into the router.
PAGE 403
< Bluetooth > Turns on Bluetooth to connect to Bluetooth devices. < Data usage > Displays the data usage and set mobile data usage limit. < Call > You can configure phone call settings such as call forwarding and other special features offered by your carrier. < More > Airplane mode – After switching to airplane mode, all wireless connections are disabled. Wi-Fi Direct – Make a connection directly with Wi-Fi devices without any Access Point.
PAGE 404
Settings centimeters. You can share your contents with a NFC tag or another NFC support device via simple touch with your device. If you touch a NFC tag with your device, it will display the tag contents on your device. To switch NFC on or off: From the home screen, touch and slide the notification drawer down with your finger, then select the NFC icon to turn it on. NOTE: When the Airplane mode is activated, NFC application can be used.
PAGE 405
VPN – Displays the list of Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) that you've previously configured. Allows you to add different types of VPN. Mobile networks – Set options for data roaming, network mode & operators, access point names (APNs) and so on. NOTE: You must set a lock screen PIN or password before you can use credential storage. DEVICE < Sound > Sound profile – You can choose the Sound, Vibrate only or Silent.
PAGE 406
Settings Ringtone with vibration – Vibration feedback for calls and notifications. Quiet time – Set times to turn off all sounds except alarm and media. Dial pad touch tones – Allows you to set the phone to play tones when using the dialpad to dial numbers. Touch sounds – Allows you to set your phone to play a sound when you touch buttons, icons and other onscreen items that react to your touch. Screen lock sound – Allows you to set your phone to play a sound when locking and 120 unlocking the screen.
PAGE 407
Aspect ratio correction – Change the resolution size of downloaded applications to fit the screen size. Front key light – Set the front key light duration. Motion sensor calibration – Allows you to Improve the accuracy of the tilt and speed of the sensor. < Home screen > Set the Theme, Animation, Screen swipe effect or Wallpaper. Select the option to set Scroll wallpaper, Scroll screens circularly and Home backup & restore. < Lock screen > Select screen lock – Set a screen lock type to secure your phone.
PAGE 408
Settings Owner info – Show owner info on lock screen. Lock timer – Set the lock time after screen timeout. Power button instantly locks – Set the screen lock when press the power button. < Gesture > Move home screen items – Press and hold item and tilt device to move item within home screens or applications. Tilt sensitivity – Test and adjust sensitivity of tilt sensor for home screen and applications. Silence incoming calls – Flip device to mute incoming call.
PAGE 409
< Apps > You can view and manage the applications. PERSONAL < Accounts & sync > Permits applications to synchronise data in the background, whether or not you are actively working in them. Deselecting this setting can save battery power and lowers (but does not eliminate) data usage. < Location services > Google's location service – If you select Google's location service, your phone determines your approximate location using Wi-Fi and mobile networks.
PAGE 410
Settings card lock or change the Micro-USIM PIN. Password typing visible – Show last character of the hidden password as you type. Phone administrators – View or deactivate device administrators. Unknown sources – Default setting to install non-Play Store applications. Trusted credentials – Display trusted CA certificates. Install from storage – Choose to install encrypted certificates. Clear credentials – Remove all certificates.
PAGE 411
Automatic restore – Set to restore your settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled on your device. Factory data reset – Reset your settings to the factory default values and delete all your data. If you reset the phone in this way, you are prompted to reenter the same information as when you first started Android. SYSTEM < Date & time > Use Date & time settings to set how dates are displayed.
PAGE 412
Settings (MTP), USB tethering, LG software or Camera (PTP). Ask on connection – Ask USB connection mode when connecting to a computer. Help – Help for connectivity. On-Screen Phone – Displaying screen and controlling phone from PC are available through USB, Bluetooth or Wi-Fi connection. PC Suite – Check mark this to use LG PC Suite with Wi-Fi connection. Please note that Wi-Fi network should be connected for LG PC Suite via Wi-Fi connection from the WIRELESS & NETWORKS.
PAGE 413
from the Internet without needing to visit a service centre. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device. As the mobile phone firmware update requires the user's full attention for the duration of the update process, please make sure you check all instructions and notes that appear at each step before proceeding. Please note that removing the USB data cable during the upgrade may seriously damage your mobile phone.
PAGE 414
Settings LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device. First, you can check the software version on your mobile phone: Settings > About phone > Software update > Check now for update. You can also delay the update by 1 hour, 4 hours, 8 hours or One day. In this case, the application will notify you to update when the time is up. You can also rearrange an update manually.
PAGE 415
NOTE: This feature is dependent on your network service provider, region and country. DivX HD ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies.
PAGE 416
Settings DTS Dolby Mobile Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
PAGE 417
LG On-Screen Phone On-Screen Phone allows you to view your mobile phone screen from a PC via a USB or Bluetooth connection. You can also control your mobile phone from your PC, using the mouse or keyboard. On-Screen Phone icons Connects your mobile phone to your PC, or disconnects it. Changes the On-Screen Phone preferences. Exits the On-Screen Phone programme. Maximises the On-Screen Phone window. Minimize the On-Screen Phone window.
PAGE 418
LG On-Screen Phone • File transfer (mobile phone to PC): sends files from your mobile phone (e.g. photos, videos, music and Polaris Office files) to your PC. Simply right-click on the file which you want to send to PC and click on "Save to PC". • File transfer (PC to mobile phone): sends files from your PC to your mobile phone. Just select the files you wish to transfer and drag and drop them into the On-Screen Phone window. The files sent are stored in internal SD card.
PAGE 419
Accessories These accessories are available for use with the LG-P895. (Items described below may be optional.) Travel adaptor Stereo headset MicroUSIM Slot Pin Data cable Connect your LG-P895 and PC. User Guide Learn more about your LG-P895.
PAGE 420
Accessories Notice: You can use more convenient if you are use the Rubberdium Pen for home screen touch. However, the bottom button (back/home/recently apps/menu button) is not run to Rubberdium Pen. Please use your finger directly. WARNING: Do not touch strongly and rub such as sharp edges NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may void your warranty. • Accessories may vary in different regions.
PAGE 421
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message MicroUSIM error Possible causes There is no Micro-USIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Possible corrective measures Make sure that the Micro-USIM card is correctly inserted.
PAGE 422
Troubleshooting Message No network connection/ Losing network 136 Possible causes Possible corrective measures Signal is weak or you're outside the carrier network. Move towards a window or into an open area. Check the network operator coverage map. Operator applied new services. Check whether the Micro-USIM card is more than 6~12 months old. If so, change your Micro-USIM at your network provider's nearest branch. Contact your service provider.
PAGE 423
Message Codes do not match Possible causes To change a security code, you will need to confirm the new code by re-entering it. Possible corrective measures If you forget the code, contact your service provider. The two codes you have entered do not match. Any application cannot be set Not supported by service provider or registration required. Contact your service provider.
PAGE 424
Troubleshooting Message Calls not available Phone cannot be switched on 138 Possible causes Possible corrective measures Dialling error New network not authorised. New Micro-USIM card inserted. Check for new restrictions. Pre-paid charge limit reached. Contact service provider or reset limit with PIN2. On/Off key pressed too briefly. Press the On/Off key down for at least two seconds. Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Check charging indicator on the display.
PAGE 425
Message Charging error Possible causes Possible corrective measures Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Outside temperature is too hot or cold. Make sure phone is charging at a normal temperature. Contact problem Check the charger and connection to the phone. No voltage Plug the charger into a different socket. Charger defective Replace charger. Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories.
PAGE 426
Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Number not permitted The Fixed dialling number function is on. Check the Settings menu and turn the function off. Impossible to receive / send SMS & picture Memory full Delete some messages from the phone. Files not opening Unsupported file format Check the file formats that can be supported.
PAGE 427
Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures The screen does not turn on when I receive a call. Proximity sensor problem If you use any protection tape or case, check to see if it has covered the area around the proximity sensor. Make sure that the area around the proximity sensor is clean. No sound Vibration mode Check the settings status of the sound menu to make sure you are not in vibrate or silent mode.
PAGE 428
Troubleshooting Message Hang up or freeze 142 Possible causes Intermittent software problem Possible corrective measures Try to perform a software update via the website.